JP7389627B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, includes a storage part that can store game media supplied from a game island installed in a game parlor, a payout device (payout part) that can pay out the game media, A guide passage forming part that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage part to the payout part, and the storage part and the guide passage forming part are attached to the game frame with screw members. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section to the game frame, the screw members attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage section and the guide passage forming section are formed. If the screw member falls into the dispensing device along with the game media, the game media may not be able to be dispensed properly, the dispensing device may malfunction, or the screw member together with the game media may fall into the dispensing device. There was a problem in that the funds were sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific result,
a starting area;
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. a means for displaying guidance;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The guide display can be displayed based on the gaming medium dispensed from the dispensing unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
A first component capable of retaining the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting portion on the screw fall restricting portion; and a second component having a higher degree of retention of the screw member than the first component. have,
The second component is located closer to the dispensing part than the first component,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means completes displaying the name of the advantageous state, which is part of a start performance to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result. performing the second guidance display before the
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Equipped with
The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, the elongated hole 316A) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. ~316C, concave grooves 326A~326C, and concave portions 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part (FIG. 11). , see Figures 12 and 27),
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. ,
moreover,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
The second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control in the advantageous state has ended.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, instructions to prompt the player can be suitably executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, during execution of a jackpot start effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-147575, a player is encouraged to shoot a game ball to the right by operating a ball shooting handle. Some were configured to give right-handed instructions. However, there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
The second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control in the advantageous state has ended.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as seen diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage formation body to the gaming machine frame. It is an enlarged back view showing the back upper part of the gaming machine frame. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10(A). (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along JJ line in (A), and (D) is a plan view showing the third cover body. (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the first state; (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in (B). It is a perspective view showing the state around the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). It is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back side of the game frame is viewed diagonally from behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guidance path formation part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. FIG. (A) shows the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) shows the state when the ball stopper is in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along the line UU in (C), showing the retention state of the screw member. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guidance path formation part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine in the feature section 053SG. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the state where the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from a data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low voltage components and high voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a circuit diagram concerning connection of a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. FIG. It is a sectional view showing a state where specific electronic parts are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between the rounds after the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of jackpot at the time of special figure 1 win. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, the first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A cover part provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part of the third cover body 330) 334),
The cover part restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling to the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portion 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that the game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part, and a state in which the screw member can be retained at all times can be maintained, so that the screw member that falls onto the cover part falls into the guide passage forming part. This can be prevented.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing unit (for example, dispensing device) of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the guide passage forming unit (for example, the first guide passage forming unit 202) A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting movement to 200) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming part to fall out of the guiding passage forming part before reaching the dispensing part. (L11>L2, see Figure 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed in the guide passage forming part, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guiding passage forming part, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming part does not get mixed into the dispensing part. can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being obstructed by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at the position closest to the dispensing section (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G). (See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part. .

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or 7,
The cover parts (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) There is an uncovered area (for example, an uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover part 334),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide passage forming part (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming part from the non-covered area, it can be dropped out of the guiding passage forming part through the hole.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage section is
disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined part (for example, the first protrusion 224) of the game frame,
The screw member is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so as not to enter between the screw member and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
a first board (for example, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, etc.) attached at a position below the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202);
a second board (for example, a terminal board 210) attached at a position above the guide path forming part;
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are mounted by a mounting method using screw members). While the terminal board 210 is attached to the game board 2 by using a screw member, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from a screw member. (See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected;
The first board has a smaller number of connected wires than the external output board (for example, the number of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 The number of cables C that can be connected to is the first number (for example, 20), while the number of cables C that can be connected to the Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subject to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member, the screw member may come off due to external force being applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming section.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided;
a mounting frame (for example, board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized in that it has a mounting frame restriction portion (for example, the recess 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame toward the guide path forming portion.
According to this feature, by using the mounting frame of the external output board, it is possible to prevent a screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) are located around the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Special restriction parts (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict falling into the forming part (Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The special restriction part prevents the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage formation part (for example, the first guide passage formation part 202) to the guidance passage formation part. A special retention part (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching the attached part, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached part,
The screw member that has come off from the attached part but does not stay in the special retention part can move toward the cover part (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), 24(B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The cover part is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the dispensing part side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) that can retain a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the dispensing portion side in the inclination direction of the cover portion (see FIG. 15, see Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to Form 16,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) sets the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202) in a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) can flow down; It is possible to change to a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium in the guide passage forming part to flow down (for example, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game balls in the first guide path forming part 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a first state in which the rotating part 341 is located at the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344. (It is possible to change into a second state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or it is difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more easily retained than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The cover part is
A first cover part provided with a retention part (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed part 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover part ( For example, the cover part 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320),
A second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330), which is different from the first cover part and is provided with the specific part;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine described in Form 18,
The second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached with a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking part (for example, the flange part F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage portion is attached to the gaming frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having locking portions (for example, screw members N11 to N14),
The screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide path forming portion (for example, the first guide path forming portion 202) to the game frame are configured so that they fall outside the guide path forming portion even if they are removed from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the screw member that attaches the storage part is difficult to come off from the game frame, the screw member that attaches the storage part and the guide passage forming part falls outside the guide passage forming part even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (e.g., ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (e.g., first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are used to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the storage section can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 22,
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached above the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The present invention is characterized in that the screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 23,
A game board (for example, game board 2) that can be attached and detached to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) of the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, above the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. A wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide path forming part onto the game board from bouncing back and being mixed into the guide path forming part again.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The guide passage forming part is
a first passage forming part (e.g., first guide passage forming part 202) extending downwardly toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming part (e.g., second guide passage forming part 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming part;
has
The cover part is provided along the first passage forming part so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part moves and falls from the lower end to the outside of the guiding passage forming part (FIG. 29). See A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting part (for example, the recess 361) in the cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) so as to intersect with the guide passage forming part. (See Figure 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and stay in the predetermined restriction portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be referred to as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be referred to as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from a player located in front of the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a panel plate provided with a guide rail 2b (not shown), and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the panel plate. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area Y), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole, including the general winning hole, is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area Y, there is provided an out opening (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. It is being The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area Y using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device ( A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) for storing batted balls is provided. A payout opening is provided below the upper plate from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. Note that a ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area Y by a player's rotational operation on the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Incidentally, there is no need for a "small win" to be displayed as a result of the special figure game.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, jackpot games during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, jackpot types that make the subsequent gaming state a high probability state) By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Figure 3), an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board 91 (see Figure 3), etc. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting winning, and if there is a winning, the CPU 103 uses random numbers such as for determining the special figure display result, for determining the jackpot type, and for determining the fluctuation pattern. is extracted and stored (stored) in the top of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special pattern game based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special pattern storage section and the second special pattern storage section, and the special pattern display result. A special system that determines (pre-determines) whether or not the fluctuating display result of a special symbol or performance symbol is a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random value for judgment before the fluctuating display result is derived and displayed. Execute normal symbol processing. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number stored when the starting winning occurred. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. Note that illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is removably provided, and a game machine frame 3 with the left side of the game machine frame 3 as the center. It has a glass door frame 50 that is provided to be openable and closable in the front of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side so that it can be opened and closed. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back side of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishing device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4 A ball tank forming part 201 forms a storage part capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming part 201, and a first guiding path is formed to guide the game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming part 202 and a first passage forming body 203 are provided to extend in the left-right direction along the upper side 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming section 202.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guiding member 150A that includes a nozzle or the like that can guide game balls in the circulation path of the game island, and a system that sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10, etc.) of game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. A sprocket (not shown) that can drive the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) that drives the sprocket, and a sprocket (not shown) that can be pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in the closed state closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is transferred to the ball tank forming part 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is held so that it cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out to the ball tank forming section 201. is being supplied to. In addition, in the replenishing device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guiding passage forming part 204 forms a second guiding passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding passage forming part 202 downward, and a game ball guided by the second guiding passage forming part 204 is provided. A dispensing device 200 forming a dispensing unit capable of dispensing balls, and a dispensing passage for guiding game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 200 to an upper tray, that is, dispensing game balls to a player. In order to discharge the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1, A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball extraction passage forming part 206 that forms a ball extraction passage guiding to a discharge part (not shown) provided at the lower part of the back side of the machine 1 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the back surface.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and inside includes a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the ball flow path between a dispensing passage and a ball extraction passage, an operating lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Furthermore, a board case 91A in which a power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which a payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3.

In this embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be put out in the second guide path on the upstream side of the payout device 200. If the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined period of time or more, it is determined that the game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball jamming, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is put out. The dispensing operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can display the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error manner.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is removably disposed in an opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a consisting of the above-mentioned board face plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, prize winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as the image display device 5 provided on the back side, the production device having the movable body 32, the board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is housed, the board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and plate-shaped The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects the performance device, electronic components, etc.

Note that the board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a cover member so that each board can be stored therein. , are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a part of the back is an opening/closing part 220A that can be rotated around the right side. The parts can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203, the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back side of the gaming board 2 are When the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, it protrudes further rearward than the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided such that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. With the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming section 201 via the supply device 150. .

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the attachment structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear side of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 221 for attaching the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and screw members N1 to N5, which are attached from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction, are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing into a plurality of formed screw holes, respectively. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 is provided to protrude rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, there is a top wall 225A, a rear wall 225B, and left and right side walls 225C. A three-dimensional second protrusion 225 is provided to protrude rearward.

The first protruding part 224 protrudes rearward from a lower position than the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, and the spherical tank forming part 201 is disposed above the first protruding part 224. Further, the first guide passage forming part 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall part 225B of the second protruding part 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted above it. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223.

In this way, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first protrusion 224 and the second protrusion 225 that protrude rearward. Therefore, game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the upper part of the game island are prevented from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of attachment holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and screw members N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into the respective screw holes. Note that the screw member N12 attached to the attachment hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. Moreover, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above into the attachment hole H16 into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 described above are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH. This is a flanged screw with a flange part F as a locking part integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is less likely to loosen compared to screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 1 to 3 mm. The length is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

Incidentally, the sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are made of flanged screws, are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member is used. It may be attached by attaching it to a screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that, when loosened, separates from the attached part. Further, the locking portion includes a locking portion of the head NH that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming part 201, and the first guiding passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open top surface so that ball clogging is less likely to occur, and if ball clogging occurs, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of a portion where game balls stacked in the vertical direction in the ball tank forming portion 201 flow into the first guide path forming portion 202. In addition, a third cover body 330 is disposed to cover the upper surface of the part where the flow flows from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the second guide passage forming part 204, so that the game ball is now rectified. However, although a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, the spherical tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arranged to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223. Further, above the pachinko game machine 1 fixed to the game island, there are screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, and various devices arranged inside the game island (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150, etc. to the frame, etc., and a plurality of screw members for assembling the plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall out due to vibrations or shocks occurring in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, shocks, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the balls may fall into the interior from the uncovered area 350 of the guide path forming portion 202 and enter the guide path of the game ball. In particular, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged directly above and near the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. Because this device is prone to vibration when new game balls are supplied from the circulation path or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed, screw members ( (not shown) or a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishing device 150 become loose due to vibration and fall off, inside the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202. There is a very high possibility that it will fall.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game balls flow down, and eventually get mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, balls may become clogged and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged along with the game balls by the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be explained below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 may get mixed into the payout device 200 and cause the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or the screw member may be lost together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent players from paying out money.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 16. In FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIG. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming part, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD in (A). In FIG. 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). In FIG. 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J in (A), and (D) is a top view showing the third cover body. 3 is a perspective view showing the cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a guide passage forming part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B standing on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in the shape of a concave or groove with an opening, and has a spherical tank forming part 201 disposed on the right side and a first guide passage forming part 202 disposed on the left side. The spherical tank forming part 201 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming part 202 is connected to an upstream part extending diagonally backward from the left side of the spherical tank forming part 201 and a downstream part extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 in the longitudinal direction is longer than the dimension of the first guiding passage forming part 202 in the longitudinal direction, so that it can store more game balls than the first guiding passage forming part 202. has been done. Furthermore, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to be gradually inclined downward from the left side of the spherical tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is The game balls are designed to naturally flow down the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 that faces in the vertical direction is protruded from the outer surface of the standing wall part 203B on the right side of the spherical tank forming part 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 that face in the front-back direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. . Further, a mounting piece 265 is provided protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the up-down direction is provided on the outer surface of the left vertical wall part 203B of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is provided on the outer surface of the upstream wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to protrude forward. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall section 203A and the rear vertical wall section 203B at the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming section 202. (See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at substantially the center in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. Furthermore, a communication hole 272 for dropping a game ball into the second guide passage forming part 204 below is formed to penetrate through the bottom wall part 203A of the downstream end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

A meandering part 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, which causes the game ball to flow down to the left side while meandering in the front-back direction, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure caused by the following ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the lower portions of the standing walls 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, and is twice the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm). (11mm<L10<22mm). In other words, the first guide passage forming section 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11>L2), as will be described later, Even if N6 gets mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 271H. It is possible to reliably make it fall out of the first guide passage forming part 202 before it reaches.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Incidentally, dirt and dust other than the screw members, or some other members can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, so that clogging of the ball due to these can be prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the spherical tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B A mounting part 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above to the mounting part 311; a standing wall part 312 extending from the right side of the mounting part 311 toward the rear side; A plate-shaped ball holding part 313 extends downwardly toward the section 201 side), a cover section 314 extends from the lower part of the standing wall section 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming section 202 side), and It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking parts 315A to 315D that are elastically deformably formed on the front side of the part 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover part 314.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner has the mounting portion 311 attached to the spherical tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 disposed near the boundary between the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the front wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding part 313 is arranged to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming part 201 from above, and the cover part 314 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202. The cover part 314 is arranged so that the upper surface of the cover part 314 is slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming part 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball holding part 313 is placed on the ball tank forming part 201 side from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming part 202 side, they are held down by the ball holding part 313 and the flow is rectified. It is now possible to do so.

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed to penetrate vertically and are arranged in a row parallel to each other. Each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 from falling. Note that reinforcing ribs are suspended from the periphery of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, as shown in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C). In this case, the game ball P can be moved in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion The right end of the cover part 324 is connected to the left end of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. The plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically lock onto the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state in which the first passage forming body 203 is brought close to each other. mounted on. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (Fig. 9 reference).

Concave grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 and are arranged in a row. The respective grooves 326A to 326C have different longitudinal dimensions L22A to L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C<2R). Note that the longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game balls, but can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the longitudinal dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the longitudinal dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L22A of the groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), is sized to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the downward direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the grooves 326A to 326C shown in FIGS. As shown in , when the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIG. 15(A) to FIG. 15(C) and FIG. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D that are formed to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface and attached from above; It mainly consists of a mounting part 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover part 334, and the plurality of locking parts 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover part 324 are connected to a vertical wall. At the same time, the threaded member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the threaded hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall part 203B. By inserting it, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover part 334 covers the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and has a recessed portion 336 having a predetermined depth extending from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. A part of the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, and is therefore formed in accordance with the shape of the meandering portion 273. Furthermore, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side can be elastically deformed so as to swing in the vertical direction. By forming an inclined plate part 339 that slopes downward toward the right side at the right end part, the game balls P stacked up and down can be leveled while guiding them to be pressed toward the bottom wall part 203A. (See Figure 16).

The longitudinal dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the front-to-back dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-back dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the downward direction of the game ball and is arranged to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, the recess 336 When the game ball P falls to the top of 336, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 (L24<L2), so that ~N16 will not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in rear view, a rear wall portion 341B disposed on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating part 341 having a connecting left wall part 341C and a projecting wall part 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334. Furthermore, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the upper part of the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 is covered by the cover part 324. Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward so as to approach the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the cover part 324 protects the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming part 202. The fluid is leveled while flowing down, and finally it is made to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the rectifying plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that it smoothes the game balls by pressing them downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stopper member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16(A), the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position where the rotating portion 341 stands upward and a tilted position where the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. is located in the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game balls in the first guide path forming portion 202 to flow down into the second guide path forming portion 204; The part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or cannot flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204. It is possible to change to a second state (difficult), that is, a ball-stopping state.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide passage forming part 204, so in this state, the game ball inside the second guiding passage forming part 204 can be controlled. It becomes possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened and consists of a front wall part 341A, a rear wall part 341B, and a left wall part 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can reside, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating part 341 is tilted, but the projecting wall part 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 and with reference to FIG. 8. In FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing the board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is a LL cross section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connection section (not shown) on the back where a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 etc. is attached/detached. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the tips of the cables C are provided at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connecting pinch in the direction of closing, that is, in the direction of pinching the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation parts 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is a first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to second boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the second board, which has a smaller number than the first number, number (for example, 10).

A plurality of operating sections 233 are provided corresponding to each of the connection holes 231, have a substantially hook shape when viewed from the side, and are swung back and forth with the base end thereof as a swiveling axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is released, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation part 233 upward or downward and swinging the operation part 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Cable C is now held. The operating sections 233 arranged in the left-right direction have alternately different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operating section 233 is pressed, adjacent operating sections 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 has an opening 234 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, there are a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, and a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 whose movement is restricted, and a positioning piece 237 that comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. have Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the board is mounted by being elastically locked by the locking part 236 while the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restriction parts 235. It is attached to the frame 211. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, during wiring work to connect a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, the operation section 233 corresponding to each cable C is connected to the terminal board 210. need to be operated. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection etc., the cable C hanging from the top of the game island is connected to the outer frame. 60, tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, the terminal board 210 is easily subject to load on the mounting portion, and if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 using screw members, the thread member may loosen and come off easily. ing.

Furthermore, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation parts 233 protrude rearward substantially horizontally, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation parts 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described later. Furthermore, a recess 242 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211, in which the screw members N3 to N6 can be accommodated.

(Installation status of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be explained based on FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. In FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide path forming section on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. In FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 24 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. 26, (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper member in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along line U-U in (C) when the screw member is in a retained state. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming part showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19(A), screw members N1 to 223 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided at the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. N2 and screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached toward the front from the back side at a position apart from the spherical tank forming part 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out backwards, there is a very low possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. .

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached to the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the spherical tank forming portion 201, from the back side toward the front. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backwards due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from the top to the bottom on the outer surface of the right standing wall 203B of the ball tank forming part 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming part 201, so that the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, the possibility of it falling into the spherical tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank that receives and stores game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and receives the load of a large number of game balls. Since vibrations and shocks are likely to occur due to the arrangement around the portion 201, a flanged screw member is used, which has a large ground contact area with the attached portion and is difficult to loosen.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the spherical tank forming part 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the spherical tank forming part 201 even if they become loose and fall out, that is, the upper surface opening of the spherical tank forming part 201. Since the balls are disposed lower than the game island, there is no chance that the balls will get mixed into the ball tank forming part 201, which is open at the top to receive and store game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30<L1). There is almost no possibility that the screw member will be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Moreover, the gap L31 formed between the rear part of the bottom wall part 203A of the spherical tank forming part 201 and the top wall part 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange part F. Since the flanged screw member is also long (L3>L2), it is almost impossible for the flanged screw member to be caught in the gap L31 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19(B), if the screw member N15 falls off from the mounting hole H15 as the mounted part and falls onto the upper wall part 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall part 220H Since the screw member N15 is tilted downward toward the back side, the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, so it is almost never held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member N15 from getting into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming part 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board and causing disconnection, etc. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20, and 21(A), screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the board A screw member N6 for attaching the mounting frame 211 to the attaching member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attaching member 223, and a third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming part 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front side and are directed forward from the back side at a position above the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the first guide passage forming part 202. In addition, the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is disposed between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko game machine If the screw members N3 to N6 become loose due to the vibration or shock generated in the first part and fall out backward, they move backward on the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is formed in a straight line toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when installing the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. It has been extended to Note that the groove 227 is formed so that the left and right width tapers toward the rear side and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202.

Here, all screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of a head NH and a male threaded portion NS, so that when falling onto the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the periphery of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS Since the screw member N3 is often tilted with two points in contact with the tip (see Figure 22(A)), the screw member N3 tilted as shown in Figure 22(B) is subject to vibrations and shocks. Sometimes, the head NH rotates and changes its direction around the tip of the male threaded portion NS. Therefore, if it falls onto a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly rearward or the head may fall. The NH may turn to the left or right by shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves rearward and curves to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves rearward in a straight line, it will most likely fall on the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and curves to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the horizontal wall section 264 in front of the first guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves rearward to bend to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover part 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 314, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread part NS is Although the head NH is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, it is locked without falling off, so that it stays on the cover part 314 without falling from the cover part 314 into the first guide passage forming part 202. I will do it. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 314 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved linearly toward the rear, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the horizontal wall 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the grooves 326A to 326C, or the male thread part NS and Since a part of the head NH is accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, it stays on the cover part 324 without falling from the cover part 324 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 324 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

In addition, if the second protruding portion 225 falls onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guiding passage forming portion 202, Remains in a tilted state. In other words, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is disposed below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a recessed portion 290 that is open at the top, so that it is accommodated and retained within this recessed portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 290 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is spaced forward from the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a possibility that it will fall into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed below the upper edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open at the top by the vertical wall 203B and the horizontal wall 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and retained in the recess 280. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 located at the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264 It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 214 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 24, when the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward to the right, when it moves rearward in a straight line, when it moves backward In either case, as shown in FIG. 24, when the board mount frame 211 moves to the right, it falls from the top wall 225A and from the rear end of the top wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between the vertical wall portion 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, there is a possibility that the head portion NH is retained without falling off. In other words, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of the threaded member N4 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation parts 233. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 are suspended from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), so these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating section 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. This constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 310, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the non-covered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall part 203A, It falls through one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the non-covered area 350 in the guide passage forming part 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202.

Furthermore, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward to bend to the left and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, it is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover part 334 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the recessed portion 336 is designed to restrict the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guiding path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding path forming portion 202. This constitutes a predetermined restriction section.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming section 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall section 203B. It is attached to the attached attachment hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves to the right, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, as shown in FIG. As described in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 in is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side contacts the ball stopper member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) that is the lower inclined side of the cover part 334, and moves downstream ( Since the movement to the left side is restricted, it stays on the cover part 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened, and the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view consisting of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is located in an upright state across the passage, so that the screw member N6 is Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only disposed so as to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so there is a possibility that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall 341A, the rear wall 341B, and the left wall 341C, so the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted is It is possible to retain the liquid more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, and constitutes a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover part 334 in the cover part 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is located in the mounting member 223 at a position that is away from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front and right side and is above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. Although it is attached to the formed attachment hole H5, the first guide passage forming part 202 is not arranged directly behind the attachment hole H5, and the upper wall part 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut in the middle. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls off backward, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to a mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming section 202 and at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall section 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backwards, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 without falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc., become loose due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, shocks, or opening/closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the cover is removed. When the ball falls onto the parts 314, 324, and 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the ball from falling onto the first guide passage forming part 202. Screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 are likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, 334 into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since vertical walls are formed at the left (downstream side) ends of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it will not flow into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, the area other than the non-covered area 350 is covered with cover parts 314, 324, and 334, but the spherical tank forming part 201 Even if the supplied game ball spills and lands on the upstream side cover parts 314, 324, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the game ball P is also narrow, after rolling toward the left side, the game ball P falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the non-covered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.

Therefore, not only can the game balls that have ridden on the cover parts 314 and 324 be returned to the first guide passage forming part 202, but also the game balls P can stay in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the fallen screw member N stays is limited, or it comes into contact with the staying game balls and falls from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202. This can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball falls onto the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is regulated by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide path forming part 202. do.

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retention part and the grooves 326A to 326C as the second retention part, the groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing this, as the screw member approaches the dispensing device 200, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part, so the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming part 202. This can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 are moved due to vibrations, impacts, etc. When falling from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall part 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming part 202 from the uncovered area 350 Even if the game ball P falls directly inside, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide path forming part 202, and approaches the bottom wall part 203A. This causes the screw member to fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 moves and enters the dispensing device 200. Contamination can be suppressed.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the spherical tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in close positions and the hole 271A that is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, by forming a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed in the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming part 201 are stacked vertically and flow down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming a region in which no hole is formed in the first guide passage forming part 202 in this way, the screw member that has fallen from the first guiding passage forming part 202 is formed on the rear wall part of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation holes 220B (see FIG. 6) and the like can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the areas where holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming part 202, the first guiding passage forming part 202 is provided with a screw member. It is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming part 202 and to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide path forming part 202 from falling outside the first guide path forming part 202 and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

Further, the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be suitably inserted from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, the game ball does not fall in the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350. are stacked up and down, so the screw member is often located at the top of the game ball, but the hole 271H is located on the downstream side of the rectifying plate 338 of the cover part 334, that is. , Since the game balls are arranged in a position where they are rectified in one level up and down, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered region 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member is not covered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming part 202 from the area 350, it can fall out of the first guiding passage forming part 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the non-covered area 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the above-mentioned As shown, even if a game ball that has fallen from the non-covered area 350 to the first guide path forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves as the game ball flows down and approaches the downward direction and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability that this occurs increases, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 are removed from the first guiding passage forming part 202. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retention parts that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 installed in the attachment holes H3 to H6 as the attached parts. The screw members N3 to N6, which were provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, are movable toward the cover parts 314, 324, and 334. , it is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 that have come off from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed. The screw members N3 to N6 retained in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 prevent the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202. (or obstruct), but also allows the retention part to remain outside the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member can be discovered by the staff of the game parlor etc. when performing inspection etc. This makes it easier to identify which screw member has come off, making it easier to take countermeasures against screw members getting mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In addition, in the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to the second guide. In the first state where the flow is allowed to flow down into the passage forming part 204, the rotating part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 is in the first state. It is possible to change the game ball into a second state in which it is impossible (or difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204, and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is better than the first state. By adopting a configuration in which the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, as mentioned above, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the second state when a game ball is pulled out from within the first guide path or the second guide path, that is, when a clerk at a game parlor or the like removes a game ball from a pachinko game machine. In contrast, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the staff of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as locking portions, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the first guiding passage forming part 202 and the ball so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. It is attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, the ball tank forming part 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming part 202 fall off, they will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, screw member N12 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202.

Moreover, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 installed above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is easy to fall through the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guiding path forming part 202 of the game board 2 which can be attached to and detached from the frame 3 for the game machine, a screw member that has fallen is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down toward the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and if the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that have fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. It can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, so that the power generated from these drive sources is A plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that emit heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). Preferably, the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper hole portions 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H disposed directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is , it is preferable to form them at least in positions that do not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall part 220H, or to form them in parts other than the upper wall part 220H (for example, the rear wall part, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and having an adverse effect on the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, etc.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part.

In the embodiment described above, the guiding passage forming part that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide passage forming part that is provided so as to be inclined downwardly toward the left side. It has a guiding passage forming part 202 and a second guiding passage forming part 204 extending downward from the lower left end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 on the upper surface of the left end part so as to protrude upward. In the above, a configuration is illustrated in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover part 334 can be received and retained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover part of Modification 1 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and can be moved to the first guiding passage forming part 202. Since the screw member N falls directly out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end thereof, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 in which the screw member N can be retained is formed on the upper surface of the cover part 360, a recess 361 is formed in the cover part 360 at a position near the recess 361. A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect with the downward direction of the game ball in the first guide path forming section 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P, which have stayed in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be kept by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
For example, in the embodiment, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, etc. to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Screw members (not shown) to be attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, various devices placed inside the game island (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) to the frame structure, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used when manufacturing a game machine or when playing a game. All screw members, such as screw members that remain in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, etc., can be targeted, but at least those screw members that have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance can be targeted. It is preferable that the screw member be prevented from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment, the spherical tank forming part 201, which is formed in a box shape with an open top surface by the bottom wall part 203A and the vertical wall part B, is used as an example of a storage part capable of storing game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage part can store game balls, the front-to-back dimension may be smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the first guide passage forming part 202, like the ball tank forming part 201. It does not have to be long, and may have approximately the same front-to-back dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202 or may be shorter. Furthermore, the top surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example is given in which the payout device 200 that can pay out game balls using a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit that can pay out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls using a member other than the sprocket.

Further, in the embodiment described above, as a guide passage forming section that is open at the top and forms a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage section to the payout section, a recess whose top surface is open is formed by the bottom wall section 203A and the vertical wall section 203B. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in the shape of a groove is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a passage forming part, and its shape, size, etc. can be changed in various ways. In addition, the width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than the ball tank forming part 201, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls, and the first guiding passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the first guiding passage forming part 202 is integrally molded, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 are separately molded. It may be integrally formed by assembling the members using screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 is also covered by the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the embodiment, a configuration in which a screw member can enter from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 The screw member may be allowed to enter through holes, notches, etc. formed on the side of the vertical wall. In addition, if a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming part 204, a predetermined restriction part for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guiding passage forming part 204, or A specific restriction section or the like may be provided to restrict the movement of the fallen screw member to the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, the entire upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover section.

Further, in the embodiment, the cover part that covers a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202 may be made of a separate member from the first guiding passage forming part 202, or It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance into a square tube shape.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. A fall regulating part (drop inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) falling from above the cover part, and a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of screw members on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a fall guide part such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from above the cover part to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202. Note that the means capable of regulating or inhibiting falling or movement may include not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like.

In other words, the predetermined restriction section for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is the predetermined restriction part for restricting the fall of the screw member onto the first guiding passage forming part 202. It does not just have to be something that makes it impossible for people to fall, it just needs to be something that makes it difficult to fall.

Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting parts are provided in the first guiding passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. or inhibition) may be a movement regulating section (movement inhibiting section). Note that means that can restrict or inhibit movement toward the dispensing device 200 side include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets that can attract metal screw members, adhesive portions that can adhere screw members, etc. It is preferable to provide these at a position that does not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a part where the game ball does not come into contact, such as a corner between the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the As long as it can restrict the movement to the side, it does not necessarily make it impossible for the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming part 202 to move to the dispensing device 200 side, but it can make the movement difficult. It is fine as long as it is something.

Furthermore, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, inhibited) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guiding path forming section 202, the movement is restricted. The downward movement of the game balls is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and remains in the first guide passage, and there is a high possibility that the balls will become clogged. If balls become clogged, a replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and a staff member at the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and removes the ball tank forming part 201 on the back side and the first guide path forming part. There is a high possibility that the status of the game balls in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the dispensing device 200 and remains in the first guide passage forming part 202, it becomes easier for the store staff etc. to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. It becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size that allows the screw member to fall, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are As long as at least two of the holes 271H to 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes do not need to be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are used as the first board installed at a position lower than the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. However, other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

Further, in the embodiment, the terminal board 210 is used as the second board mounted above the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Other substrates such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

Further, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the performance control board 12 are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed by screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various boards described above as the first board may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without using a board case.

In addition, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the production control board 12 have board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is housed with screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is attached to the game board 2 as a second board, is attached to the game board 2 by the attachment method, using a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a different attachment method than the attachment method using screw members, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may include a mounting means, an adhesive means using an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming part 202 to prevent the screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. Although a configuration in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied as special restriction portions for the purpose of A fall regulating part (fall inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the fall of the screw member, a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member to the first guide path forming part 202, , a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall out of the first guiding path forming portion 202 may be used. Note that means that can restrict or inhibit falling or movement toward the first guide path forming portion 202 include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, and means capable of adhering screw members. It may also be an adhesive part or the like.

In other words, the special restriction part for restricting the screw member that has come off from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is not only one that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guiding passage forming part 202; Any material that can be made difficult to fall is sufficient. For example, a convex portion serving as a fall regulating portion (fall inhibiting portion), a recessed portion or a hole serving as a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion), etc. may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the periphery of the first guide passage forming part 202 in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as special restriction parts are provided is located near the front vertical wall part 203B. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least as long as it is between the attached part (attachment hole) to which the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming part, it is not necessarily provided at a position near the vertical wall part 203B. For example, the screw member may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guiding passage forming portion.

Further, in the embodiment, a first specifying portion is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover portion 334 as a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334. Although the embodiment in which the ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming part 202 is allowed to flow down and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to flow down is applied, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and any member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower inclination side) of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction can restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball-stopping function. It may also be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring holder, etc. that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific part may be provided at the end of the cover parts 314, 324 on the dispensing apparatus 200 side, as long as it is provided at the end of one cover part on the dispensing apparatus 200 side.

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed in a part of the member constituting the cover part 334.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the locking part, a flange part F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head part NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head part NH is used. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the flange portion F may be replaced with a washer etc. that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member, or a head It also includes the rotation stopper of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and includes members such as screws and bolts that separate from the attached part when loosened.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange parts F as loosening prevention parts, and the ball tank forming part 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are arranged so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. , the first guide passage forming part 202 and the spherical tank forming part 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper edge of the vertical wall 203B of the guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201, for example, it may be shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201. If the screw member is attached to a position other than directly above the screw member, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the fallen screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guide portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). Good too.

In addition, the predetermined restriction part, specific restriction part, special restriction part, and identification part in the embodiment are not limited to the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the movement of screw members other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and further the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming part 202 and the ball tank forming part 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferable that it be formed in a size and shape that allows (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for implementing a gaming machine in the feature section 053SG according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in the feature section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a slot machine, etc., and in particular, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a gaming control board. The pachinko game machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied as the gaming machine described below, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be used as the game control board, and the performance control board 12 can be used as the performance control board. It is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, a sensor that specifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a sensor that identifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel. These include detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and detection switches for detecting door openings, abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and the detection status of input signals from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output parts such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output parts include, for example, a display that displays according to lottery results, a display that displays the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value owned by the player. LEDs that indicate the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of an abnormality, motors and solenoids that operate movable parts used in games such as reels and variable winning devices.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer, and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is carried out via a shared data bus.

Also, rather than all input circuits being connected via a shared data bus, some input circuits are directly connected to the gaming control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and are connected via a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through the input circuit.

In addition, all output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and are connected to the shared data bus. A configuration may also be used in which output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the gaming control microcomputer is output to external equipment as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance, etc. of a gaming machine using the output data outputted as .

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be explained using Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. The game control board has an electronic component mounted on one surface, no electronic component mounted on the other surface, and a terminal provided on the electronic component is soldered.In the following, the electronic component is mounted. The surface is called the mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called the soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate through the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to connect the through holes as appropriate. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board, an insulating region made of an insulator and a ground region made of a conductor and forming a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. , the number of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, Designs such as detours around wiring patterns can be minimized.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring pattern placed on the solder side has many wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance between the wiring patterns is longer than that of the wiring pattern placed on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the solder surface is obstructed by the electronic components. This is avoided.

Also, when branching a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through a through hole. The wiring pattern is branched without detouring one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the input circuit and output circuit mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, so as to be lined up in the lateral direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, a large proportion of the wiring patterns extend in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. By doing so, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction can be directly connected to the rows of terminals arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic components having terminal rows are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave cutout on one of the short sides, and a surface of the input circuit and the output circuit, as shown in Figure 30-4. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. As shown in Figure 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in Figure 30-4 and the direction in which the model number is printed is from left to right, while the output circuit is , in Figure 30-4, the notches are arranged to the right, and the model number is printed in the direction from right to left. It is said that it is possible to specify whether there is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

As mentioned above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-6, electronic components such as data buses, input circuits, and output circuits are connected to wiring patterns that are formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. Connected by

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are soldered horizontally. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally can be efficiently connected. In addition, since the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components. Since the connection is made by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is determined by the antenna with maximum resonance depending on the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed to be shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, thereby preventing unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock is 1/2, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum depending on the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the board. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, although the bus clock varies depending on the installed game control microcomputer and oscillator, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that has the expected maximum frequency. It is formed to be shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, and further not to be half the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, depending on the bus clock at maximum frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted using a bus clock that is less than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts constituting the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, the direction of the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts is They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the horizontal wiring pattern divided into a plurality of parts and the diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward wiring pattern are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-5, mounting is carried out through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern that connects the horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. It is designed to branch into side wiring patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. The wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is now branched using

In addition, in the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. In this configuration, horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts are connected to each other by diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. In other words, the horizontal wiring pattern is formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at a point where it switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to bypass the wiring pattern after branching. , it becomes possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground region is formed in the left region of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the right region of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-7, wiring patterns to which low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this example) signals are transmitted are connected to the game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. Electronic components (low voltage components) are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminals of the low voltage components are connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this example) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. The high voltage component is mounted in the right region where the second ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor causes a gap between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, current is prevented from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed to overlap with the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface, and the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap with each other. Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first and second ground areas on the solder surface overlap, there is Even if a temporary potential difference occurs, interference with each other is prevented.

Figure 30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and Figure 30-11 is a diagram showing the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in this example. It is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. The wiring from the game control board includes a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal that allows setting values that define advantages for players such as lottery probability to change to a state that can be changed, and a signal that allows changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantageousness of the game, such as signals that display information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs detection signals for error cancellation operations, and backup power supplies. Includes wiring as a supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. As shown at -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors such as connector numbers is printed around them. ing. Note that the information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may also include information regarding the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side passes through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal, and the wiring on the mounting surface. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in connectors CN1 to CN7. It is provided at the location where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, the solder surface can be connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the gaming machine while being housed in the board case. The board case can be sealed with one-way screws, seals, welding, etc., and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving traces. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the gaming machine while it is housed in the board case, the game control board is structured to be prevented from being tampered with.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is housed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering part of the board case on the mounting surface of the game control board, but the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, through which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside and can be connected to external wiring.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, there will be some gaps around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to external wiring, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the terminals are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. This prevents fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Furthermore, the area around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering part of the board case, and the area covered by the covering part has wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering part, Illegal acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1-CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1-CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the gaming control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. A line branched between is connected to a backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with a backup power supply VBB so that data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

FIG. 30-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the printed wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the solder side of the game control board, there are wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 that supply normal power, and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power, as wiring patterns that constitute the power supply line. , is formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is free from external noise. This prevents data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, noise is blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in Figure 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is reduced in the corresponding area. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side and used for signal transmission is suppressed as much as possible.

Note that, in this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. The configuration is such that it is formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting side, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder side, the signal that triggers the lottery Wiring patterns that transmit signals that are related to the player's interests, such as signals that control output parts, are better suited to the mounting side than wiring patterns that transmit signals that are not directly related to the player's history, such as signals that control output parts. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area, it can be used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern through which signals related to the player's profits are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit reset signals to the game control microcomputer and wiring patterns that provide an operating clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A location where the wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there is less noise, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used to transmit signals of relatively high importance from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side used for signal transmission is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a slot machine. Slot machines are equipped with game components related to games, such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board that controls production, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When attaching the game control board to the slot machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, should be placed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game parlor, it is often installed so that its back faces face each other with other game devices such as other pachinko game machines. When the game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, is used for other games. It is attached so that it is placed on the device side. With this configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

(effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a proportion of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The proportion of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), which is different from the first direction. The ratio of wiring patterns extending in this direction is larger than that of wiring patterns extending in this direction. According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When a wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) intersects with a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), it is possible to minimize the need for detours around the wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), which can be long in distance, can be formed on the solder surface without being obstructed by electronic components.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from a first wiring pattern to a second wiring pattern, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern at the branch destination or to cross one wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern can be suitably arranged. can be formed.

(effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and connects a specific signal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting (input data, output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into multiple wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left/right direction). Each straight line wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left and right) has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than the According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). Each of the wiring patterns is formed shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length that corresponds to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and can prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a wiring pattern that is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched using the space between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of a specific signal (input data, output data), This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the board. Since there is no radio wave, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) connected to a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a wiring pattern through which a signal is transmitted, a first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and a second electronic component ( A high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulation part (insulation area). Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended current from flowing backward through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) signal is transmitted is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating section. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in current flowing through wiring patterns connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even if the difference in current flowing through the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so unintended current flows backward through the ground. This can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. .

The game control board of this embodiment has a first ground area formed on one side (left side), a second ground area formed on the other side (right side) opposite to the one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component). ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are respectively formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this example has a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

Note that the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area and The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, respectively, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface to the other surface, interference with each other can be prevented.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is installed in a game machine while being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the part where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the gaming advantage (signal for transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed, changing the setting value It is characterized by including wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display. According to such a configuration, fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting part of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Therefore, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this area, it is possible to effectively utilize the area on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering part that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering part. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral area of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so the connector It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portions of the connectors (CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a microcomputer for game control having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for game control can hold the memory contents of the storage means (RAM) using a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used by the microcomputer for game control. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to the semiconductor device is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface where no electronic components are mounted, so it is possible to bypass the electronic components. Since it is not necessary to form a wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is less susceptible to external noise, and it is possible to prevent data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the side of game components related to the game (such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the other gaming machine (other gaming machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment has a solid area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder side. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is set to A feature is that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say, it can be done.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls games, but other boards installed in a gaming machine, such as a board that controls performances. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the provision of game media and gaming value, and further, a board that relays between boards.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in Example 1, and here, mainly the different configurations from the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. .

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Furthermore, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board in the region where the wiring pattern is not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of Example 1, the game control board in Example 2 is also equipped with an input circuit and an output circuit, and these input circuits and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, and A concave notch is provided on one of the sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right. They are arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

A data bus is formed on the game control board, which is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-21, the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extends vertically in the vertical direction. .

In this way, when connecting a game control microcomputer and input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are connected to a data bus on the solder side that extends laterally. At the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. becomes. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and furthermore, the data bus is connected to the input circuit and output circuit. are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this time.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the gaming control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, the game control board has connectors CN10 to CN17 mounted near the top side in the figure for connecting wiring from outside the game control board, and also connects a data bus. The constituting wiring pattern is formed in a region of the game control board near the bottom side in the figure, that is, a region near the other side opposite to one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is secured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input/output to and from external electronic components of the game control board. It has become.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board receives an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used to control the game (which does not trigger the lottery). A first input circuit that detects an input from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, an advantageous Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the movable parts such as solenoids and motors operate according to the progress of the game. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the process, and a second output that displays various displays, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. A second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components is mounted on the game control board based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and is used to determine the payout rate etc. of the game machine when playing games over a certain period of time. A third output circuit is implemented to output an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, first output circuit, second output circuit, and third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. will be carried out.

As shown in Figure 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations, and vertically branches on the mounting side. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of a third output circuit. Further, wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to terminals of the first output circuit. In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are left as they are to the outside. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the input and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the output circuit. Connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used to control the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, output signals are sent to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the output signal has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. connected to the data bus. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display is other than the performance display. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the display device (second output component) that displays the progress of the game. connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display due to the placement of unauthorized parts, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting side, which is connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side, changes depending on the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and the wiring pattern branches on the mounting surface and outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Connected to the external output terminal for output to. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole. The wiring pattern is divided into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side is a second output component that outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the 2-output circuit, it also has a configuration in which it branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting output signals to external equipment in accordance with the progress of the game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment, it is possible to connect to multiple output circuits. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The second input circuit among the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position T in the diagram, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side at position T in the diagram. At this position, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, connects to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that detects an input signal from a second input component that has higher importance than the first input component is connected directly to the data bus without being connected to the data bus. It is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since the input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer without going through any intermediaries, the input data based on important input signals is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the game control microcomputer. The input circuit is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs output signals to electronic components (output components) based on the output data transmitted from the input circuit. Data can be prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is connected to the input circuit. It is also possible to connect to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data to the gaming control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the gaming control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer; a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit includes: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the second output circuit outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components, the output data may be affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part from being affected in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. A second output circuit outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game. is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is short, which prevents output data from being affected by noise and other factors that affect the display as the game progresses. can.

In addition, like the game control board of Example 1, the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When a two-ground area is formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to high-voltage components. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is mounted in the first ground area because it often belongs to low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region, there is no need to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, which prevents a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface. The wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment are to be branched, so in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns, Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit that is used to control the game control microcomputer. A second input circuit transmits input data based on input signals from two input components to the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit transmits input data to the first output component and second output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a gaming control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected through a through hole to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed, by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is said that According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is opposite to one side of the gaming control board. It is characterized by being formed in an area closer to the other side (lower side). According to this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively. .

The gaming control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more connected to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other display devices. By shortening the wiring pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display contents due to the placement of illegal parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientation of the components is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modifications illustrated in the first embodiment are also applicable to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be explained. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. In addition, the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and through-holes mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through-holes will be explained.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of specific electronic components mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic components, and (B) is , is a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and the lower part of the specified electronic component has a mounting plate for fixing the specified electronic component to the board, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B). fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are used for the purpose of propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; will be provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component. An electronic component that does not include a fixing terminal but only has a connection terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through hole provided in the game control board consists of a normal through hole and a specific through hole. Normally, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), through-holes are plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is connected to the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through-hole that conducts through. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), a specific through hole is a through hole in which copper plating is not applied to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, and the through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering a through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper plated, so the solder inside the through hole reaches the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the inside of the through hole must be soldered because copper plating is not applied inside the through hole. This prevents solder from flowing up and reaching the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specified through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so when soldering, the solder It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder because it is too high on the mounting surface side where components are mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it will not be discovered even if a part is illegally replaced.Furthermore, if the model number is hidden during the type test, the component configuration cannot be identified and the test will not pass, resulting in approval. There is a risk that the terminals with the model number printed or engraved on the top may not be approved for installation at the gaming parlor because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the gaming parlor. This problem can be prevented by fixing with.

On the other hand, fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or power from specific electronic components, so problems may occur if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldering through specific through holes. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted through a through hole and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured by the solder reaching the mounting surface.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted into a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the terminal is fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, forming a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component among multiple electronic components is fixed. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface is not electrically conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and causing problems.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is soldered to the specific through hole because the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are soldered to the specific through hole, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. By not doing so, there will be no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of this embodiment has a structure in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may also be used in which terminals (connection terminals) for transmitting component signals and power are inserted and soldered. With this configuration, solder does not rise too much to the mounting surface where electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short circuits between terminals that transmit signals and power of specific electronic components and other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in Examples 1 and 2 are also applicable to Example 3.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As explained above, the feature section 053SG includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have generally been equipped with a board on which electronic devices are mounted, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-93428. As this type of board, one has been proposed that inputs and outputs data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment using one data bus. In this type of board, various problems exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of feature part 053SG (1) is as follows:
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means outputs data to the electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means. Since the wiring pattern up to the control means is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the output circuit that outputs the signal, input data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine (3) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (soldering surface) on which the data bus is formed by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine (4) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3),
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively.

The gaming machine (5) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more effective than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the other display device. The device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer (for use with the computer) is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other display devices, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized parts from being used. It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display contents by changing the arrangement of the display.

The gaming machine (6) of feature part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that their components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the difference between an input circuit and an output circuit.

The gaming machine (7) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine (8) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the first output circuit outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc. This can prevent the operation of the parts from being affected.

The gaming machine (9) of feature part 053SG is
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected to the data bus through a through hole. A first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal to an external device in accordance with the progress of the game.
According to this feature, the data bus formed on the second side is connected to the first side by using the wiring pattern on the first side through the through hole to perform output according to the progress of the game on the first side. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern is formed on the second side in order to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine (10) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
a first input that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); A circuit (first input circuit) and input data based on input signals from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) transmits to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine (11) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits data to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise, etc., so the display changes depending on the progress of the game. can be prevented from affecting.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there are other gaming machines (eg, , a pachinko gaming machine 1), which includes a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P), and a payout section (for example, payout device 200), and a guide passage forming part (for example, a second guide passage) whose upper surface is open and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part. 1 guide passage forming part 202 and the second guiding passage forming part 204), and cover parts (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part. , a third cover body 330), the cover part restricts the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. Predetermined limiting portions (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portions 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24) to prevent the drop from falling into the guiding path forming portion. A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting the movement of the screw member to the dispensing portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction portion ( For example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that game media that has fallen onto the cover can fall from the cover without being retained, and furthermore, the player a firing means capable of ejecting gaming media into a gaming area in response to an operation of the game area; a guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the medium using an image display, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, the guide display means , during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of a start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, The second guidance display is performed, and after completion of displaying the name of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is An example of a game machine is a game machine that continues the second guidance display even when the control ends, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.

According to such a configuration, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part and the screw member can always be kept in a state where it can stay, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part is prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. can do. Further, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In other words, by preventing screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to break down, and also to prevent screws from falling or getting mixed in with the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part. During the period, the instruction to fire the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized on the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the second guide display is taken over without taking over the first guide display and the game ball is launched in the predetermined direction. By instructing the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling bothered by not emphasizing the instruction too much, and furthermore, by first displaying the second guidance display, the player is discreetly instructed to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. After that, the name of the advantageous state is recognized, and after the recognition, the first guide display allows a firm instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to malfunction when installed in a gaming parlor, and that provides easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which the game ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, the game machine is capable of preventing screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part, and can suitably execute instructions urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. An example of the form is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, and which displays game media in a gaming area according to the player's operation. using an image display to cause the game medium to be launched toward the second downstream path of a first downstream path and a second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the gaming area; a guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means displaying a display result of the variable display according to the specific During a predetermined period after the display result, the second guidance display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous condition is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous condition. After the display of the state name is completed, the first guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is started. For example, there is a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol” or “first special symbol,” and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “first special symbol.” It is also called ``2nd special pattern'' or ``2nd special pattern.'' Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), the game board 2 is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiver member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

The gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. For example, reach effects include normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5, etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 33, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The production control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 37(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 37(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to the small win gaming state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line and storing them in internal memory. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-1 to 40-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 40-4), and the big winning hole door changes between an open state and a closed state (hereinafter referred to as (usually referred to as the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 40-4), and the big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 40-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with.

Here, FIG. 40-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the microcomputer 100 for game control, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 40-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 40-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 storage display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 40-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 40-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 40-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 40-5, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 40-6 to 40-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 40-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 40-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 40-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 40-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 40-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 40-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 40-8 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 40-8 (B) are set as jackpot determination values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 40-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 40-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 40-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 40-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 40-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 40-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 40-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 40-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 40-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 40-8) and a jackpot determination random number, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 40-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 40-8(A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 40-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 40-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 40-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 40-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 40-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 40-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 40-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is ended.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 40-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 40-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 40-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 40-14, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 40-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 40-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 40-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 40-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 40-17 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 40-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 40-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 40-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figures 40-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figures 40-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the effect (see Figures 40-43) to aim for V. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 40-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see FIGS. 40-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3-based command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the ending performance (FIGS. 40-46, 40) indicating the end of the jackpot gaming state. -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. Suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 40-19 to 40-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIG. 40-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 40-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 40-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 40-19 to 40-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 40-19, at t1, when the first special figure game starts by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a reservation storage number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of production, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-20, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion performance (see FIGS. 40-41) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIGS. 40-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIGS. 40-43) based on the specified command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 40-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 40-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 40-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIGS. 40-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In contrast, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIGS. 40-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in FIGS. 40-60, but may also include a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to indicate that no game is being played. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 40-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 40-22(A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are illuminated by white painting as shown in Figure 40-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 40-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 40-23 to 40-33 and FIGS. 40-38 to 40-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 40-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 40-23 (b1) to 40-24 (b3) as a pending storage number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-23 (b1) to FIG. 40-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 40-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right hit display. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-24 (c1) to 40-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-24 (c1) to FIG. 40-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 40-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a production part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses image displays of characters and figures as described later in FIGS. 40-24 (c4) to 40-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 40-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 40-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 40-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare performance, following Figure 40-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example "BONUS!!" of the character image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Figure 40-24 (c4) to Figure 40-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed player") are displayed as an effect to promote right-handed players. ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 40-34 to 40-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 40-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 40-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 40-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 40-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 40-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 40-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the lamp on the right side of the frame, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 40-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 40-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 40-25 (c4) to 40-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 40-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 40-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is specified at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 40-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 that stores the data described above, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 40-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 40-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the production control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 40-25 (c4) to 40-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 40-25 (c4), the production mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "right" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right hand" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right strike!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right strike!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion performances.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 40-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for playing right-handed) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be made so as not to interfere with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 40-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round occurs as shown in FIG. 40-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage shown in FIG. 40-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-39 (d3) to 40-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-39 (d3) to FIG. 40-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. It should be noted that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed at the top right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 40-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 40-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 40-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the regular jackpot opening opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 40-40 (e2), during the 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 40-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-41 (e5) to 40-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-41 (e5) to FIG. 40-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) specifying after opening the grand prize opening to the production control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-42 (e10) to 40-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-42 (e10) to FIG. 40-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a text image "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed together with a character image so as to overlap a background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be executed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is subsequently displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-44 (e14) to FIG. 40-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-44 (e16) to 40-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-44 (e16) to FIG. 40-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), when the V-winning performance is executed, a " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) specifying after opening the grand prize opening to the production control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-45 (e19) to 40-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-45 (e19) to FIG. 40-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A205 command) to the production control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-46 (f1) to 40-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-46 (f1) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-48 (g1) and (g2) as a reservation storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIGS. 40-48 (g1) and (g2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sends the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 40-48 (g3) to 40-49 (g5) as a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-48 (g3) to FIG. 40-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 40-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIGS. 40-50 (h1) and (h2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in Figures 40-25 (c4) to 40-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V preview effect, Aim for V effect, and V winning effect are performed during the round, as shown in Figures 40-40 to 40-46, and eventually the jackpot round ends. , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 40-46 and 40-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIGS. 40-51 are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare performance due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-20. .

As shown in FIGS. 40-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 40-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 40-24 (c2)) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 40-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), a performance image during 1R as shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIGS. 40-52 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-20.

As shown in FIG. 40-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 40-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIGS. 40-53 are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 40-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 40-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIGS. 40-54 are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-20.

As shown in FIG. 40-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 40-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview effect as shown in FIG. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIGS. 40-55 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the player wins the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 40-55, if a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 40-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview effect as shown in FIG. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 40-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of jackpot at the time of special drawing 1 win. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 40-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 40-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect to aim for V as shown in FIG. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 40-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-57 is assumed to be power outage 7 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-21.

As shown in FIG. 40-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 40-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in the state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 40-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, and as shown in Figure 40-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 40-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of the jackpot when the player wins the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 40-58, when a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 40-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIGS. 40-59 are explanatory diagrams showing the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-21.

As shown in FIG. 40-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 40-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. 40 -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 40-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIGS. 40-60 are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 40-60 assumes a power outage 10 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 40-21. .

As shown in FIG. 40-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 40-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 40-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 40-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 40-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature section 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)), A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the production and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion production),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 40-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the V target effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hit suggestion effect) 40-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 40-51 and 40-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)); a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)); and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 40-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figures 40-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIGS. 40-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hit suggestion effect) 40-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 40-51 and 40-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)); a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)); and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hit suggestion effect) 40-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 40-51 and 40-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 40-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-39(e1) to 40-46(e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is finished, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 40-48 and 40-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 40-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 40-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5)) (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 40-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 40-32 (c26) to 40-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the big right-handed promotion effect. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 40-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 40-32 (c26) to 40-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-hand hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 40-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. As shown in 40-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 40-24 image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed hit promotion effect) (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 40-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 40-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 40-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 40-25 to 40- As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 to 40-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 40-38 (d1) - As shown in FIG. 40-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 40-38 (d1) to 40-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion performance involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 40-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (d1) to 40-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song) is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen for selecting a performance mode is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, an image display based on the group preview performance was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, you may use a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuation notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In either case, even if a special performance display is performed in a variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance may be prevented from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V-large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a character image "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right hit!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, an image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas an image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 40-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 40-39 (d3) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) (t4 in FIG. (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot for one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R will make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a probability-variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the sound will be emitted from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2).

Similar to the example shown in Figure 40-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion effect is continued while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare effect, and then, after that, as shown in FIG. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 40-25 (c4) to 40-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hitting promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hitting promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 40-48 to 40-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion effect may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First starting port switch 22B Second starting port switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C Normal figure hold indicator 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gates 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control Microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control section 200 Dispensing device 202 First guide passage forming section 201 Ball tank forming section 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Holes 314, 324, 334 Cover section 340 Ball stopper member N1-6, 11-16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific result,
a starting area;
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. a means for displaying information;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The guide display can be displayed based on the gaming medium paid out from the payout unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
A first component capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting part on the screw fall restricting part; and a second component having a higher degree of retention of the screw member than the first component. have,
The second component is located closer to the dispensing part than the first component,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means completes displaying the name of the advantageous state, which is part of a start performance for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result. The second guidance display is performed before the
A gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.